Index of /wp-content/uploads/2020/08/
Index of /wp-content/uploads/2021/09
2012
OWNER'S MANUAL
200 Convertible
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
2
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Illuminated Entry -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Vehicle Security Alarm -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Convertible Top Operation Button -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26 Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . 39
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Remote Starting System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 48
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 48
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 56 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -- Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 61
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 2
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 80
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place.
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with either side up.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Ignition Key Removal
NOTE:
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to · If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
the ACC position, push the key slightly inward, rotate the lever into PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this 2
occurs, place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to
the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If
a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in
the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 -- LOCK 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 -- ON/RUN 4 -- START
· For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, handsfree system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, handsfree system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition sounds a chime signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: · The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
· With either front door open, and the key in the ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded 2
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning the ignition switch to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. 2
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
· This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch (one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be open or closed), and close all doors.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the
power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
2
NOTE: · During the 16-second arming period, if a door is
opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.
· Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on the instrument panel, and the HomeLink/Garage Door Opener (if equipped).
To Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: · The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will sound.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY -- IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to "Mirrors" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately NOTE:
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the · The line of transmission must not be blocked with
ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF metal objects when using the RKE transmitter.
position..
· Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all 2
NOTE:
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
· The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
Dome ON position (extreme top position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, open the convertible top (if equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
RKE Transmitter With Integrated Key
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Approach -- If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Convertible Top Operation Button -- If Equipped Refer to "Convertible Top Operation" under "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Unlatch The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times to unlatch the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm
2
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system
(if equipped) will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key "Customer Key Programming."
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: · Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Battery Service 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.
General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of a battery is five years.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
2
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 66 ft (20 m).
NOTE: · The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: · Shift lever in PARK · Doors closed · Hood closed · Trunk closed · Hazard switch off · Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) · Ignition key removed from ignition switch · Battery at an acceptable charge level, and · RKE PANIC button not pressed · System not disabled from previous remote start event · Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) -- If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
· Remote Start Aborted -- Door Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Trunk Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low
· Remote Start Aborted -- System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: · For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a 2
third cycle. · If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: · The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 · Any engine warning lamps come on · Low Fuel Light turns on · The hood is opened · The hazard switch is pressed · The transmission is moved out of PARK · The brake pedal is pressed
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one-time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the inside door handle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
Manual Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
2
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door trim panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Auto Unlock Door On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
2
NOTE: This feature will not be functional until the vehicle has been driven and the shift lever returned to the PARK position.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/ RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door trim panel operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory delay feature is active.
NOTE: · If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts
while driving with the windows down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger's door trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Smart Glass Feature The door window will lower slightly if the window is fully up when opening the door. The window will return to its full up position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and top seal damage.
Auto Window Down -- If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will 2
cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Reset Window Smart Glass Feature for Opening/Closing the Door If the vehicle battery goes dead, the window Smart Glass Feature for opening and closing the door will be disabled.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To reactivate the window Smart Glass Feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored.
1. Lowering all four windows to the full open position.
button (setting it in the down position). To enable the window control, press and release the window LOCK button again (setting it in the up position).
2. Press and hold the Power Top Switch in the Close direction. Once the Power Top becomes fully closed, all four windows will start closing.
3. Continue to hold the Power Top Switch an additional two seconds after the windows are fully closed.
4. Push all the window switches down firmly to open the windows completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the passenger door. To disable the window control on the passenger door, press and release the window LOCK
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one window down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open both windows together to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The convertible top must be either closed and latched or open and latched to release the trunk.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
The trunk release button on the dash
will be disabled if the vehicle is locked
by pressing the power door lock
switch or by pressing the LOCK but- 2
ton on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The trunk release
Trunk Release Button
button will be enabled when the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE or if the
key is inserted into the ignition and
turned to ON/RUN or START.
NOTE: This provides a locked area in the vehicle even if the convertible top is open.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE button on the RKE transmitter two times.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the word "dECK" will display in the odometer indicating the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is pressed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out, the word "dECK" will display until the trunk is closed.
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the words "Trunk Ajar" will display.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
Trunk Internal Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
· Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
· Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint) -- if equipped
· Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
· An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
· Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
· Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event
· All seat belt systems (except the driver's) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 2
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance.
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued) Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
· Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. · Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
· A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could 2
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. · A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. · A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
WARNING!
· A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
· A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
2
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraints" section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Driver
First Row
N/A
Second Row ALR
· N/A -- Not Applicable
Center N/A N/A
Passenger ALR ALR
· ALR -- Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) -- If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until 2
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
· Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
WARNING!
· The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
· Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant's chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) -- If Equipped These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear 2
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 -- Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 -- Seatback
3 -- Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 -- Head Restraint Guide Tubes
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to "Adjusting Active Head Restraints" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver's and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
1 -- Downward Movement 2 -- Rearward Movement
3 -- Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
· For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
2
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE: · If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender, and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. 2
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -- Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 -- Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 -- Knee Bolster
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
NOTE: · Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
· After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
· Air Bag Warning Light
· Steering Wheel and Column
· Instrument Panel
· Knee Impact Bolster
· Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
· Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
· Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
· Front and Side Impact Sensors
· Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
WARNING!
· No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. · Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. · Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
2
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates 2
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
· Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor 2
immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal 2
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force 2
required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner's manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)".
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)".
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
· Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
· The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
· Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or 2
slouching can move the belt out of position.
· If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint:
· Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
· Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
· The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
· Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.
· All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
· Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides
for the installation of the child restraint without using the 2
vehicle's seat belts. The two rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belts. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to "Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System".
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all 2
child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position. Access ports to the tether anchors are located in the panel between the rear seat and the rear window. The
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint, push the tether strap and hook through the access port and down into the trunk. Open
the access cover on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor. Be careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
your child unattended in the vehicle.
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
WARNING!
"Automatic Locking Mode". The chart below defines the 2
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
First Row
Driver N/A
Center N/A
Passenger ALR
killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly Second Row ALR
N/A
ALR
when installing an infant or child restraint.
· N/A -- Not Applicable
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
· ALR -- Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
· If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
· In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.
1. If lowered, raise the convertible top.
NOTE: The convertible top must be in the UP position to access the tether anchor.
2. Open the access port cover (A) behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
4. Open the access cover (C) on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook (D) to the anchor.
2
Child Tether Access Port Cover 3. Push the tether strap and hook (B) through the access port and down into the trunk.
NOTE: Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path from the child seat to the anchor.
Child Tether Anchor
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil · Do not leave children or animals inside parked
in the engine or damage may result.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may 2
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its · It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
ously injured or killed.
SAFETY TIPS
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Transporting Passengers
belts.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO · Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
AREA.
using a seat belt properly.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your 2
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners.
· Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
· Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
· Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
· If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or 2
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise The Top
Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions . . . . 92
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cargo Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Power Convertible Top Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Lowering The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . 99 Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped . . . 111
Raising The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . 100 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Wind Stop -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Power Convertible Top Operation And
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Vanity Mirror -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UconnectTM Phone -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 114 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
UconnectTM Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Lumbar Support -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 154
Things You Should Know About Your
Easy Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
UconnectTM Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Voice Command -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 144 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 162
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . 162
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Headlight Time Delay -- If Equipped . . . . . . 163 Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 3
Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped . . . . 165 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 172
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped . . . . . 173
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 168 To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Garage Door Opener -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 176 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . 177 Front Seat Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 180 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 181 Glove Box Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 190 Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Ski Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver -- If Equipped 188 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
· Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.
· Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
· Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is impor- 3
tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
You can lower or raise the power convertible top from inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Either operation takes approximately 30 seconds. The entire process, including unlatching or latching the top at the windshield header is automatic.
The top does take up some space in the trunk when retracted. However, the trunk will still hold a significant amount of cargo.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When operating the power convertible top, the trunk lid will pivot at the rear of the vehicle, swing open by the rear window, and then pivot backward. This allows room for the top to retract into or unfold from its stowage area in the trunk.
When lowering the top, the system extends the hard tonneau cover, which stows conveniently underneath the trunk lid. The tonneau cover closes the area between the rear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when stowed.
When raising the top, the system retracts the hard tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the trunk lid.
To complete either operation, the trunk lid returns to its normal position and then latches.
Spring-loaded flipper doors, which provide clearance for the linkage, close off notches in the quarter trim panels when the top is down.
Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions
NOTE: · The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle
is stationary, the cargo shield is positioned correctly, and the trunk lid is closed and latched. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower, However, the system allows you to raise the top at ambient temperatures as low as -40°F (-40°C).
· Do not attempt to lower the top when frost, ice, or snow may be present, this could cause damage or prevent the top from stowing completely.
· The Power Top Control Module (PTCM) monitors and controls lowering and raising of the top. A series of micro-switches verify that operations are complete before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising operation.
· Opening and closing the top consecutively without the engine running may run the battery down.
· If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts while driving with the top down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
CAUTION!
· Correctly position the cargo shield in the trunk before stowing the top. Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation (stowing) to proceed. If
the switch is not closed, a warning message dis- 3
plays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver. · Always place items carefully into the trunk. · Do not push items too far into the trunk, particu-
larly when the top is retracted into its stowage area in the trunk. · Do not use the area on top of the tonneau cover for storage. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, cargo shield, and the vehicle interior.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Before operating the power top: · Always check on top of the tonneau cover area to
be sure that it is clear of debris or other items. · Make sure the ambient temperature is above 0°F
(-18°C). · Never attempt to lower a frozen convertible top.
Wait until the top is thawed before lowering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering a cloth top at temperatures below 32°F (0°C) should be avoided. · Make sure the convertible top is dry before lowering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering the top when damp, wet, or dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside of your vehicle. · Make sure there is sufficient clearance of at least 7.5 ft. (2.2 m) for the top to move up.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
· To prevent striking a low ceiling or automatic door opener with the top, it is strongly recommended that you do not operate the power top inside a garage or parking structure.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
CAUTION!
· Do not operate the power top with the hydraulic pump valve open.
· Do not allow the top to remain in the suspended position. After approximately 10 minutes in the suspended position, the hydraulic pressure will release, which will allow the top and the trunk lid to lower. Pressing the power top switch will cancel this operation.
· Always use a normal ice scraper to remove snow or ice from the rear window. Use of a sharp object or other tools could scratch the panels (hard top) or tear the fabric (soft top) when removing snow or ice.
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Always close the top when leaving your vehicle so as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially damaging outdoor conditions.
· Do not leave the top lowered for several weeks at 3
a time. Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out. This is especially important if the top was stowed when not completely dry.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior:
(Continued)
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: · Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. · Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. · When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
· When using the power top switch on the instrument panel, if potential danger exists while raising the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
· Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment.
· Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion.
Cargo Shield The cargo shield is located in the trunk. Before lowering the convertible top, you must unfold the cargo shield and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner. Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation. If the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.
Positioning The Cargo Shield For Top Operation Pull the cargo shield toward you to begin unfolding the panels. Grasp the handle in the center of the outermost (top) panel and raise the cargo shield. Then, align and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner as shown in the illustration.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
CAUTION!
Do NOT place items on top of the cargo shield. Items
placed on cargo protector will interfere with the top
during operation and cause excessive damage to the
top and cargo shield.
3
Cargo Shield
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning The Cargo Shield For Cargo Storage To maximize the storage space in the trunk, the cargo shield can be stowed in the forward portion of the trunk.
To stow the cargo shield, grasp the handle of the upright panel of the cargo shield, lifting the pins out of the V slots in the trunk trim. Continue folding the upright panel forward onto the horizontal panel, then grasp both panels and lift them to the forward, upright position in the trunk.
Stowed Cargo Shield NOTE: The convertible top will NOT operate with the cargo shield in the stowed position.
Power Convertible Top Controls The power top switch is located on the front of the center console.
There is also a power top button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter for remotely lowering the power convertible top.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Lowering the Power Convertible Top
Using The Power Top Switch
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and
when in the power accessory delay.
3
There are two Top Down switch positions. Press and hold the switch to the first detent. The system will lower all fully raised windows approximately 0.5 in (10 mm), lower the top to its fully retracted position, and then raise the windows. Press and hold the switch to the second detent. The system will lower all four windows and the top to their fully retracted positions.
Power Top Button
The driver has to press and hold the convertible top switch during the entire opening cycle, if there is an obstruction and the driver is alerted, the convertible top operation can be stopped by releasing the switch.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Raising The Power Convertible Top
NOTE: Steps 1 3 must be performed within five seconds.
1. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Using The Power Top Switch
NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay.
2. Press and release the POWER TOP button on the RKE transmitter.
3. Press and hold the POWER TOP button until the Power Top and All Windows Down feature is complete.
Press and hold the switch in the Top Up position until the operation of raising the top and latching it is complete, which is indicated by the system raising the windows and displaying "TOP DONE" in the odometer or "CONVERTIBLE TOP COMPLETE" in the EVIC (if equipped).
Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter You cannot use the power top button on the RKE transmitter to raise the power convertible top. You must use the power top switch inside the vehicle to perform this operation.
Manually Closing the power convertible top manually is a complicated and physically demanding procedure, and it requires a special tool to do so. In the event that you experience a malfunction when operating the power convertible top:
1. Read all of the Notes, Cautions, and Warning found under "Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions" to verify all operating conditions are met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Wind Stop -- If Equipped The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. However, when not in use, the Wind Stop folds to allow
for convenient storage underneath the cargo shield in the 3
trunk.
NOTE: It is recommended that you lower the convertible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop.
2. Check for Operation and Warning Messages as described under "Power Convertible Top Operation and Warning Messages." If applicable, perform the related action to correct the condition present.
Installing The Wind Stop 1. Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk. 2. Unfold the Wind Stop framework.
3. If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem, refer to 3. Lay the small frame (1) flat on top of the large frame
"Emergency Bypass Mode".
(2) and snap the two frames together by engaging the
frame lock (3).
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The frames must lie flat on each other in order to snap them together.
4. Pivot the small frame (1) away from the large frame (2) until the pivot lock (3) engages to lock the two frames in an L shape.
5. Unfold both stems at the rear of the large frame.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
6. Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim panel.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the hole in each trim panel. Slide the pins outward until fully extended into each hole.
Removing And Storing The Wind Stop Reverse the installation procedure to remove, fold, and store the Wind Stop. However, note the following before doing so:
Disengage the pivot lock (1) to fold the small frame flat onto the large frame. Disengage the frame lock (2) to disconnect the small frame from the large frame.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Power Convertible Top Operation And Warning Messages
(EVIC) if equipped, or in the Odometer for vehicles not equipped with the EVIC. Refer to the following chart for
When the appropriate conditions exist, the PTCM dis- message related information:
plays various power convertible top operation and warning messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
EVIC Mes- EVIC
sage
Message
Display
Time
Odometer Odometer Odometer Odometer Chime
Message
Message Message
Message
(< 5 mph
Display (> 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time [8 km/h]) Time
Condition Operator 3
Action
Required
CONVERT- Until Op- TOP nOT SE- Until Op- --
IBLE TOP eration is CUrE
eration is
NOT SE- Complete
Complete
CURED
--
--
The Sys- --
tem is
Lowering
or Raising
the Top
CONVERT- 9 sec. IBLE TOP COMPLETE
TOP DONE
Display -- Scrolls for 6 sec.
--
Single
The Sys- --
Chime
tem Com-
pletes Op-
eration of
Lowering
or Raising
the Top
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC Message
SECURE CARGO SHIELD
EVIC Message Display Time
9 sec.
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(< 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
SET CARGO Display
SHIELD
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(> 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
--
--
Chime
Single Chime
CONVERT- Until OpIBLE TOP eration is NOT SE- Complete CURED
TOP nOT SE- Until Op-
CUrE
eration is
Complete
TOP nOT SE- Until Op-
CUrE
eration is
Complete
Single Chime
Condition Operator Action
Required
The Top Position
Fails to the Cargo
Move
Shield in
When Op- the Trunk
erating the to Allow
Power Top Top Op-
Control eration
The System Fails to Complete Operation of Lowering or Raising the Top
Cycle Power Top Control
EVIC Mes- EVIC
sage
Message
Display
Time
SPEED
9 sec.
TOO HIGH
TRUNK AJAR
Continuous
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(< 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
SPEED TOO Display
HIGH
Scrolls for
9 sec.
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(> 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
TOP
6 sec.
Chime
Single Chime
DECK
Continu- DECK ous
Continu- Single
ous
Chime
Condition Operator Action
Required
You Are The Top
Operating Will Not the Power Operate
3
Top at a Unless the
Vehicle Vehicle is
Speed
Stationary.
Greater
Than
0 mph
(0 km/h)
The Trunk Lid is Unlatched or Open
The Top Will Not Operate Unless the Trunk Lid is Closed
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EVIC Mes- EVIC
sage
Message
Display
Time
CONVERT- 6 sec. IBLE TOP MALFUNCTION
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(< 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
TOP FAIL
Display Scrolls for 6 Seconds
Odometer Odometer
Message
Message
(> 5 mph
Display
[8 km/h]) Time
TOP
6 sec.
Chime
Single Chime
CONVERT- Until Fault TOP FAIL
IBLE TOP is No Lon-
MAL-
ger De-
FUNCTION tected or
Repaired
Display TOP Scrolls until Fault is No Longer Detected or Repaired
Display Single Flashes Chime until Fault is No Longer Detected or Repaired
Condition Operator Action Required
The PTCM Refer to Activated Foot Note the System LOCKOUT Feature
The PTCM See your Activated authorized the System dealer for LOCKOUT service Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
If so equipped.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC.
The PTCM will lockout the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunction-
ing, or the battery is run down, or the hydraulic pump is overheating. In addition, the system prohibits lower-
ing the top when ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature
is below -40°F (-40°C).
3
· If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0°F (-18°C) or lower, wait until the temperature
rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the power top. A soft top should not be lowered at tem-
peratures below 32°F (0°C).
· If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C), wait until the temperature
rises before operating the power top.
· If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, see your authorized dealer for service.
· If the battery is run down, have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer.
· Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively (usually more than six or
seven times depending upon the ambient temperature). Wait at least five minutes before operating the power
top again. NOTE: If lockout occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating, the system will allow you to raise the
top without waiting five minutes. However, do so only if necessary.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Bypass Mode (To Raise The Top Only) This procedure is only to be used to raise the top when the top cannot be returned to the UP (raised) position by pressing the POWER TOP switch or is in a position in which the vehicle cannot be driven. Please follow these emergency bypass instructions to return the top to the UP (raised) position.
Press the POWER TOP switch in the Top Up direction five times within two seconds and hold the switch in the Top Up position for a minimum of two minutes.
CAUTION!
· Once this procedure has been completed and the top is in the UP (raised) position, see your authorized dealer. DO NOT exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
CAUTION! (Continued) · Using the Emergency Bypass Mode could poten-
tially damage the convertible top and should only be used to raise the power top to the UP (raised) position when the normal top operation is not functioning.
If damage starts to occur while in the Emergency Bypass Mode, immediately release the power top switch and see your authorized dealer.
NOTE: This procedure may take more time to fully raise and close the power top. It is not uncommon to see delays of up to 30 seconds before operation begins.
(Continued)
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror -- If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate.
Auto Dimming Mirror
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Power Mirror Switch
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. When finished, return the knob to the center "O" (Off) position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Mirror Directions
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror -- If Equipped A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and flip the mirror cover upward.
UconnectTM Phone -- IF EQUIPPED
UconnectTM Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. UconnectTM Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., "Call" "Mike" "Work" or "Dial" "248-555-1212"). Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UconnectTM Phone.
NOTE: The UconnectTM Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth "Hands-Free Profile", Version 0.96 or higher. See the UconnectTM website for supported phones.
Vanity Mirror
For UconnectTM customer support, visit the following websites:
· www.chrysler.com/uconnect
· www.dodge.com/uconnect
· www.jeep.com/uconnect
· or call 18778558400
UconnectTM Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.
The UconnectTM Phone is driven through your Bluetooth "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. UconnectTM features Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UconnectTM Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's UconnectTM Phone. The UconnectTM Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only 3
in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.
UconnectTM Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(UconnectTM Phone button and Voice Com-
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word UconnectTM followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operation" section.
The UconnectTM Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the UconnectTM website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.
The UconnectTM Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the UconnectTM Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UconnectTM Phone such as "CELL" or caller ID on certain radios.
Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UconnectTM Phone and to navigate through the UconnectTM Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most UconnectTM Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.
· Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Ready" prompt or another prompt.
· For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Setup" and then "Pair a Device", the following compound command can be said: "Pair a Bluetooth Device".
· For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command "Phonebook New Entry", or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: "Phonebook" and "New Entry". Please remember, the UconnectTM Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.
Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep. The UconnectTM Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UconnectTM Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions. UconnectTM Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UconnectTM Phone To A Mobile Phone 3
To begin using your UconnectTM Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. The UconnectTM website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UconnectTM Phone pairing instructions:
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Device Pairing".
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When prompted, after the beep, say "Pair a Device" and follow the audible prompts.
· You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.
· For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UconnectTM Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.
· You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your UconnectTM Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your UconnectTM System. The priority allows the UconnectTM Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the UconnectTM Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to "Advanced Phone Connectivity" in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial".
· The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
· For example, you can say "234-567-8901".
· The UconnectTM Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
· The UconnectTM system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your UconnectTM Phonebook
· Press the button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to the UconnectTM Phonebook is 3
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
"Call".
· Press the button to begin.
· The system will prompt you to say the name of the · After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
"Phonebook New Entry".
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say "John Doe", where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UconnectTM phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to "Add Names to Your UconnectTM Phonebook", in the phonebook.
· When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say "Robert Smith" or "Robert" instead of "Bob".
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., "Home", "Work", "Mobile", or "Other"). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
· When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.
The UconnectTM Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, UconnectTM Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone's phonebook.
Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, UconnectTM Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See UconnectTM website for supported phones.
· To call a name from the UconnectTM Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a Name" section.
· Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UconnectTM Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
· A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UconnectTM Phone.
· Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
· Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
· Only the mobile phone's phonebook is downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Edit UconnectTM Phonebook Entries
NOTE: · Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
· Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be 3
deleted or edited.
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Edit Entry".
· This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UconnectTM Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to UconnectTM Phone on the next phone connection.
· You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
· Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
· When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.
"Phonebook Edit Entry" can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add "John Doe's" work number later using the "Phonebook Edit Entry" feature.
Delete UconnectTM Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
· Press the button to begin.
· After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say "List
Names" to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
UconnectTM Phone is playing the desired entry and say
"Delete".
· After you enter the name, the UconnectTM Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
· Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say · Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
"Phonebook Delete".
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Delete/Erase "All" UconnectTM Phonebook Entries List All Names In The UconnectTM Phonebook
· Press the button to begin.
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say · After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say
"Phonebook Erase All".
"Phonebook List Names".
· The UconnectTM Phone will ask you to verify that you · The UconnectTM Phone will play the names of all the 3
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
· After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be book entries, if available.
deleted.
· To call one of the names in the list, press the
· Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
button during the playing of the desired name, and say "Call".
· Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
NOTE: The user can also exercise "Edit" or "Delete" operations at this point.
· The UconnectTM Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
· The selected number will be dialed.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UconnectTM Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UconnectTM Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call -- No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the UconnectTM Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call -- Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UconnectTM Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say "Dial" or "Call" followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to "Toggling Between Calls" in this section. To combine two calls, refer to "Conference Call" in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
3
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under "Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress". After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial".
· The UconnectTM Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the UconnectTM Phone.
Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UconnectTM Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
· After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the UconnectTM Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UconnectTM Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
· After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the UconnectTM Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the UconnectTM Phone to the mobile phone.
· An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UconnectTM Phone Features
Language Selection To change the language that the UconnectTM Phone is using:
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
· Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UconnectTM Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:
· Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
If the phone is not reachable and the UconnectTM Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Emergency" and the UconnectTM Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE: · The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
· If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say "Setup", followed by "Emergency".
· The UconnectTM Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your UconnectTM Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be: · turned on, · paired to the UconnectTM System, · and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance:
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Towing Assistance".
NOTE: · The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour "Towing Assistance" coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour Towing Assistance references.
· If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say "Setup", followed by "Towing Assistance".
Paging To learn how to page, refer to "Working with Automated Systems". Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UconnectTM Phone.
Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to "Working with Automated Systems".
Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UconnectTM Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the UconnectTM Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
When calling a number with your UconnectTM Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word "Send". For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can 3
press the
button and say, "3 7 4 6 # Send". Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by "Send",
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored UconnectTM phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, "Send." The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UconnectTM Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE: · You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
· Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.
Barge In -- Overriding Prompts
The "Voice Command" button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking "Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...," you
could press the
button and say, "Pair a Phone" to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the UconnectTM Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say one of the following:
- "Setup Confirmation Prompts On"
- "Setup Confirmation Prompts Off"
Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the UconnectTM Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UconnectTM Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the UconnectTM Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The UconnectTM Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UconnectTM Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the UconnectTM Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UconnectTM Phone:
· Press the
button.
3
· Following the beep, say "Mute".
In order to un-mute the UconnectTM Phone:
· Press the
button.
· Following the beep, say "Mute off".
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The UconnectTM Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the UconnectTM Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your UconnectTM Phone paired mobile phone to the
UconnectTM Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say "Transfer Call".
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The UconnectTM Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively "connected" with one electronic device at a time.
· When prompted, say "List Phones".
· The UconnectTM Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To "Select" or "Delete" a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say "Select" or "Delete". Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to "Select" or "Delete" a
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the UconnectTM Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
· Press the button to begin.
Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UconnectTM Phone.
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Select Phone" and follow the prompts.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say · You can also press the button at any time while the
"Setup Phone Pairing".
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
· The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the UconnectTM Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete UconnectTM Phone Paired Mobile Phones
· Press the button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing".
· At the next prompt, say "Delete" and follow the prompts.
· You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Things You Should Know About Your UconnectTM Phone
UconnectTM Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say "UconnectTM Tutorial."
3
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UconnectTM
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UconnectTM Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):
· Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
· Press the
button and say the "Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training" command.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can either press the UconnectTM Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UconnectTM Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Command
· For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1/2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
· Always wait for the beep before speaking.
· Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Reset
· press the button.
· After the "Ready" prompt, and the following beep, say "Setup", then "Reset".
· Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.
· Performance is maximized under:
· low-to-medium blower setting,
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
· low-to-medium vehicle speed, · low road noise, · smooth road surface,
· fully closed windows,
· dry weather condition.
· Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
· When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say "Send".
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
· Numbers must be spoken in single digits. "800" must be spoken "eight-zero-zero" not "eight hundred".
· You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero).
· Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing 3
number combinations may not be supported.
· In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
· Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
· It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UconnectTM Phonebook.
· Phonebook (Downloaded and UconnectTM Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
Far End Audio Performance · Audio quality is maximized under:
· low-to-medium blower setting, · low-to-medium vehicle speed, · low road noise, · smooth road surface,
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· fully closed windows,
· dry weather conditions, and
· operation from the driver's seat.
· Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the UconnectTM Phone.
· Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
SMS UconnectTM Phone can read or send new messages on your phone.
Read Messages: If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to UconnectTM Phone, an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:
· Press the button.
· In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be · After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
"SMS Read" or "Read Messages."
Recent Calls If your phone supports "Automatic Phonebook Download", UconnectTM Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
· UconnectTM Phone will play the new text message for you.
After reading a message, you can "Reply" or "Forward" the message using UconnectTM Phone.
Send Messages: You can send messages using UconnectTM Phone. To send a new message:
· Press the button.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Send" or "Send Message."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
3
7. I love you
· You can either say the message you wish to send or say "List Messages." There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say "Send."
UconnectTM Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to.
8. Call me 9. Call me later 10. Thanks 11. See You in 15 minutes 12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:
13. I'll be late
1. Yes
14. Are you there yet?
2. No
15. Where are we meeting?
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the UconnectTM Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
· Press the button.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement," you will then be given a choice to change it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all
Voice Commands Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial
Voice Commands Alternate(s)
pairing phone book
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send set up
3
phone settings or phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UconnectTM Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.
VOICE COMMAND -- IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as "barging in." The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel", "Help" or "Main Menu".
These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
3
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand
button and say "Help" or "Main Menu".
Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Volume
· "Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button.
2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.
· "Setup" (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM To switch to the AM band, say "AM" or "Radio AM". In this mode, you may say the following commands: · "Frequency #" (to change the frequency) · "Next Station" (to select the next station) · "Previous Station" (to select the previous station) · "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu) · "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
· "Radio" (to switch to the radio mode)
· "Disc" (to switch to the disc mode)
Radio FM To switch to the FM band, say "FM" or "Radio FM". In this mode, you may say the following commands: · "Frequency #" (to change the frequency) · "Next Station" (to select the next station) · "Previous Station" (to select the previous station) · "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu) · "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
· "Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)
· "List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)
· "Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)
· "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
3
· "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
Disc To switch to the disc mode, say "Disc". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode, say "Sat" or "Satellite Radio". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "Track" (#) (to change the track) · "Next Track" (to play the next track) · "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
· "Channel Number" (to change the channel by its · "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu) spoken number)
· "Next Channel" (to select the next channel)
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode, say "Memo". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "New Memo" (to record a new memo) -- During the recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
- "Previous" (to play the previous memo)
- "Delete" (to delete a memo) · "Delete All" (to delete all memos)
Setup To switch to system setup, you may say on of the following:
- "Save" (to save the memo)
· "Change to setup"
- "Continue" (to continue recording)
· "Switch to system setup"
- "Delete" (to delete the recording)
· "Change to setup"
· "Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos)
-- During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
· "Main menu setup" or · "Switch to setup"
- "Repeat" (to repeat a memo)
- "Next" (to play the next memo)
In this mode, you may say the following commands: · "Language English" · "Language French"
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the UconnectTM Voice "Voice Training" feature may be used.
· "Language Spanish" · "Tutorial" · "Voice Training"
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say "System
Setup" and once you are in that menu then say "Voice
3
Training." This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the "Barge In" commands.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by UconnectTM Voice. For best results, the "Voice Training" session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
3
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under any seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls.
Heated Seats -- If Equipped On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system automatically switches to LOW-level heating and turns one indicator light OFF after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation. If LOW-level heating is selected, the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
· Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position.
3
Recliner Adjustment The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.
Seatback Adjustment
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
· Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support -- If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the
Lumbar Support
Easy Entry System The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
When returning the seat to its normal position, the memory feature restores the seat position and seatback recline position to their current settings.
On the driver seat, pull the lever upward to move the
seatback forward.
3
When returning the seatback to its normal position the
memory feature restores the seatback recline position to
its current setting.
Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Easy Entry Lever
Pull the lever upward to move the seat and seatback forward.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints -- Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
3
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to "Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE: · The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
· Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.
3
Head Restraints -- Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted. For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Hood Release Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the hood and raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if equipped).
3
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights, parking
Multifunction Lever
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation.
Lights-On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) -- if equipped. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Time Delay -- If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition 3
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
Fog Lights -- If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is released and the shift lever is in any position
except PARK.
3
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is not operating.
Front Fog Light Control
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Turn Signal Control
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the FlashTo-Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash-To-Pass function again.
Interior Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center console. You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
CAUTION!
· Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
3
· Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Changing Wiper Speeds
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the "Park" position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Changing Intermittent Settings
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) -- if equipped. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Infor-
3
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your In-
strument Panel" for further information.
Mist Control
Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
Windshield Washers To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the lever upward until fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
3
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
1 -- ON/OFF 4 -- CANCEL
2 -- RES + 3 -- SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
WARNING!
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To 3
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
NOTE: · Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener 1 -- Door Opener 2 -- Training Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly press and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
3
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
· If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
3
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
ing steps.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while you press and release ("cycle"), your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
· If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for · Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
ter.
· Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: · The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse.
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the climate control knobs, has power available only when the ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
NOTE: To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second power outlet is located inside the center con- NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob
sole.
and element must be used.
Center Console
The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
· Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.
· Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 -- #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
· Do not touch with wet hands.
3
· Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER -- IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to "Power Outlets" in "Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle" for further information.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholder The cupholder in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles or cans. The one-piece insert can be removed easily for cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located in one of the cupholders.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders Cupholders for the rear seat occupants are located in the armrests. Each cupholder is capable of holding up to a 20 oz. (.5 L) bottle or can.
Rear Seat Cupholder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Glove Box Storage Compartment The glove box storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. To open the glove box, pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of the glove box.
Storage
The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort. The center console can be used for storage and is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to "Power Outlets" in "Understanding The Feature of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Glove Box Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
3
Center Console
Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest.
Center Console Storage
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console's front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: · A notch in the front of the console base allows for use
of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power outlet with the armrest latched down.
· The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in the optional cup holder ash receiver.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback in not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
· To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
· The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the 3
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ski Pass-Through There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through door.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Ski Pass-Through
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Mini-Trip Computer -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 216
Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) --
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Oil Change Required -- If Equipped . . . . . . 221
EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4
Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 EVIC Units Selection (Units In Display) . . . . 227 System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Media Center 230 (REQ) -- AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 231
Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 239
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 241
List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite Radio) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/ RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Operating Instructions (UconnectTM Phone) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 251
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode . . . . . 251
Operation Instructions -- CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 259
Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio (Sales Code RES+RSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode . . . . . 260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Operation Instructions -- CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 270
List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 282
Steering Wheel Audio Controls -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 271 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 4
UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite Radio) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
iPod/USB/MP3 Control -- If Equipped . . . . . 276
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 285 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 285 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) -- If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 -- Air Outlet 2 -- Side Window Demister Outlet 3 -- Instrument Cluster 4 -- Ignition Switch 5 -- Analog Clock
6 -- Radio 7 -- Passenger Airbag 8 -- Glove Compartment 9 -- Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 -- Hazard Switch
11 -- Storage Compartment 12 -- Climate Control 13 -- Trunk Release Button 14 -- Power Outlet
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading below the H (red) mark of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
2. Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
3. Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
4. Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
5. Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3.0 gallons (11.3 Liters) of fuel is added.
6. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's electrical devices, such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
7. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
driving,
during starting, stays on, or turns on while have the system inspected at an authorized
4
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints"
in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for
further information.
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light will come on and remain on when the
ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position, and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine. This can be determined using the procedure shown in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".
10. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
11. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds. The light should then turn
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
13. Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds). Refer to "Trip Odometer Button" for additional information.
Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will display the following messages:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down TOP FAIL . . Convertible Top Up/Down Operation Failed SET CARgO SHIELd . . . . . . . . . . The Convertible Top
Cargo Shield Must Be Put In The Stowed Position
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
SPEEd TOO HIgH . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Is Too High For Convertible Top Up/Down Operation
TOP donE . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down Operation Is Complete
TOP nOT SECUrE . . . . Convertible Top Is Not Secured LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe
Threshold 4
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then all warnings including "Low Tire," "Door Ajar" and "Trunk Ajar" will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" for specific messages).
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to "Convertible Top Operation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for a table that explains how long each message is displayed and the conditions under which each message is displayed.
LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles.
HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a engine oil over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the "HOTOIL" message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime.
Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the words "gASCAP" will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the "gASCAP" message. (Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System -- OBDII" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information). If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible.
CHANgE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "CHAngE OIL" message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".
15. Cruise Indicator -- If Equipped This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
4
Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to "Trip A." Press and release it a second time to change the display to "Trip B." Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage that you want to reset, "Trip A" or "Trip B." Then push and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator -- If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver.
20. Turn Signal Indicators The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn
signal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
21. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on.
22. Vehicle Security Light -- If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed. The light will stop
flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light -- If Equipped This light monitors the ABS. This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required, however,
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to 4
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should come on. If the light does not come on, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE: · The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
· Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 4
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
4
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
28. High Beam Indicator This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display -- If Equipped This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" for further information.
Control Buttons
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER -- IF EQUIPPED The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
RESET Button To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Trip Odometer (ODO) This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
The following displays can be reset or changed: · Trip A · Trip B
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
4
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) -- IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
· Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
· Mileage (Avg/MPG)
· Miles To Empty
· Low Tire Information (Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Displays) -- if equipped
· Timer
· Units
· System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
· Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
· Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
· Audio Mode Displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing
The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features. Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and release.
Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions
4
or Personal Settings.
DOWN Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading, the outside
temperature, and Audio Info (when the ra-
COMPASS dio is on) screen when the current screen is Button not the compass, outside temp, audio info screen.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the SELECT Button to accept a selection. The SELECT Button also resets various Trip Functions. SELECT Button
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:
· Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled)
· Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
· Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
· Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
· Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
· RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a single chime)
· Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park
· Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion
· Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion).
· Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion).
· Trunk Open (with vehicle graphic showing and open trunk and A single chime )
· Lights On
· Key In Ignition · Remote start aborted -- Door ajar · Remote start aborted -- Hood ajar · Remote start aborted -- Trunk ajar · Remote start aborted -- Fuel low · Remote start disabled -- System fault · Convertible Top Not Secured (with a single chime) · Convertible Top Complete (with a single chime) · Secure Cargo Shield (with a single chime) · Speed Too High (with a single chime) · Convertible Top Malfunction (with a single chime) · Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
· Low Tire (with a graphic of the car showing which tire(s) is/are low - with a single chime). Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operating.
· Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and
Operating.
4
Oil Change Required -- If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed. The following features are in the Main menu: · Compass, Outside Temperature, Audio Information (if
radio is on) display · Average Fuel Economy · Distance to Empty · Tire Pressure Status display · Elapsed Time · EVIC Units Selection · System Status · Personal Settings
Compass Display The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the compass button to display one of eight
COMPASS compass headings, the outside temperature, Button and audio information (if the radio is on) if the EVIC display is not already displaying
this screen.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
EVIC will flash the "CAL" indicator until the compass is calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
4
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the compass:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the DOWN button until "Calibrate Compass Yes" displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button and the "CAL" indicator will start flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly (under 5 mph / 8 km/h), completing one or more circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell phones, iPod's, radar detectors, PDA's and laptops) should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
3. Press and release the DOWN button until "Compass Variance" and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
4
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
Average Fuel Economy
Compass Variance Map To Change Compass Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
Tire PSI Press and release the MENU button until Tire PSI is displayed.
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
· If tire pressure is OK for all tires, TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the graphic.
· If one or more tires have low pressure, LOW TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing.
· If the Tire Pressure System requires service, Check TPM System is displayed. Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset.
Elapsed Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
System Status
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
in the RUN or START position.
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing
hours:minutes:seconds
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu.
4
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
START.
Features)
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature, Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure features. Press and Release the SELECT button
Press and release the MENU button until "Personal Settings" displays in the EVIC.
to toggle units between U.S. and METRIC.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features:
Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.
Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
RKE Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "Driver Door 1st Press" or "All Doors 1st Press" appears.
Sound Horn with LOCK When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with LOCK feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lamp with LOCK When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with LOCK feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, UconnectTM phone (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
4
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press the SELECT button until
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears.
Illumin. Approach When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until "OFF," "30 sec," "60 sec," or "90 sec" appears.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "U.S." or "METRIC" appears.
Compass Variance Refer to "Compass Display" for more information.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held.
Calibrate Compass Refer to "Compass Display" for more information.
Setting The Analog Clock
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) -- AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
4
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.
SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button UconnectTM Phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the UconnectTM Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Phone Button UconnectTM Phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the UconnectTM Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
4
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit Classicl
Program Type
Classic Rock College Country
Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public
Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock
16-Digit Character Display Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Soft R & B
Sports
Sports
Talk Top 40
Talk
4
Top 40
Weather
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.
· DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).
· DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
· DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:
· Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
· Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).
· Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).
NOTE: · The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
· These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
· VESTM Power - Allows you to turn VESTM ON and OFF (if equipped).
· VESTM Lock - Locks out rear VESTM remote controls (if equipped).
· VESTM CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
· Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.
· Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Menu Language -- If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select other.
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
4
Audio Language -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other. Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitle Language -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other. Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On.
Audio DRC -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to High, and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal.
Aspect Ratio -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay -- If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by DISC Button
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
4
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
button number will display.
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate "Disc Hot" and shut off until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components.
Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button -- Loading Compact Disc(s) Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays INSERT DISC, insert the CD into the player.
Eject Button -- Ejecting Compact Disc(s) Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE) Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE) Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
RW/FF (CD MODE) Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
4
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/ WMA files). Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/ WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: · Maximum number of directory levels: 8 · Maximum number of files: 255 · Maximum number of folders: 100 · Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/ WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a three- When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
character extension)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA Specification
WMA
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
44.1 and 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, 4
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
4
No function.
Operating Instructions -- Voice Command System (If Equipped) For the radio, Refer to "Voice Command" in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - UconnectTM Phone (If Equipped) Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES)TM (If Equipped) Refer to "Video Entertainment System (VES)TM" for further details.
Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTSTM DTSTM and DTSTM 2.0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite Radio) -- If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Please have the following information available when calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
4
mode.
Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:
· The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
· Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
· Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
· Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be 4
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:
· Display Sirius ID number -- Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/ RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.
Refer to your UconnectTM Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or RHB user's manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) -- If Equipped Refer to "Voice Command" in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (UconnectTM Phone) -- If Equipped Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in the UconnectTM User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
Media Center 130 (RES) Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
4
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions -- CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: · The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio. · This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
· This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism. · The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
4
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
· Maximum number of folder levels: 8
· Maximum number of files: 255
· Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
· Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a three- 4
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is 4
not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO (SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Phone Button UconnectTM Phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the UconnectTM Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Voice Command System (Radio) -- If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to "Voice Command" in "Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With
tures Of Your Vehicle". Voice Command Button UconnectTM Phone -- If
Uconnect screen.
Phone"
message
will
display
on
the
radio
4
Equipped
TIME Button
Press this button to operate the UconnectTM Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in "Under- and radio frequency.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
screen.
SCROLL control knob.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
4
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit Classicl
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classic Rock College Country
Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public
Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock
16-Digit Character Display Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock
Program Type
Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
16-Digit Character Display Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:
· Set Clock -- Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
window. Select the button (16) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
4
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC/AUX Button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions -- CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: · The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
· This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
· This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism. · The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
4
TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
· Maximum number of folder levels: 8
· Maximum number of files: 255
· Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
· Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
4
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite Radio) -- If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Please have the following information available when calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Reception Quality
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
the radio to exit this screen.
following reasons:
Selecting UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite) Mode · The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display. A structure or under a physical obstacle.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.
· Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
4
Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
· Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause · Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as cause signal blockage.
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.
Operating Instructions - UconnectTM Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be 4
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:
· Display Sirius ID number -- Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - UconnectTM Phone (If Equipped) Refer to "UconnectTM Phone" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ REL/RET radios only with UconnectTM. For sales code RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio iPod/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User's Manual. iPod/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.
NOTE: · If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
UconnectTM Multimedia radio User's Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability.
· Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod /MP3 control feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle's USB connector port which is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/ MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
4
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port:
USB Connector Port
· The audio device can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
· The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device)
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data:
· Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.
Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the "AUX" button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB. Once in the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.
Play Mode When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play
· Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track.
· Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track
· Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.
· Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF >> button.
· A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
· Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list, or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track.
· While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
· Press the SCAN button to use iPod/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
ous and next tracks.
4
· RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device, or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
· Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.
· TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device.
· Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable.
· During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
· In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device.
· Preset 1 Playlists
· Preset 2 Artists
· Preset 3 Albums
· Preset 4 Genres
· Preset 5 Audiobooks
· Preset 6 Podcasts
· Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
· To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
· LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system.
· MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
CAUTION!
· Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer's guidelines.
· Placing items on the iPod or external USB device, 4
or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the UconnectTM phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BTSA mode, press either "AUX" button on the radio or press the VR button and say "Bluetooth Streaming Audio".
Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle's audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the UconnectTM phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the UconnectTM phone system, but just one can be selected and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
2. After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup, then Select Audio Devices.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the UconnectTM phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Next Track" to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Previous Track" to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the 4
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o'clock positions.
Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
4
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
Manual Temperature Control
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
not using UconnectTM (if equipped).
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "O" (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction) Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side
4
window demist outlets.
Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Bi-Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE: · Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
· The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
· The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
· Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash several times then go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically is these modes are selected.
· The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
· When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
· MAX A/C For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time.
· ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature. 4
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) -- If Equipped
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.
Automatic Temperature Control
Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the "O" (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: · The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
· Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
· While operating in AUTO, the system will not auto-
matically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the
windshield. The defrost mode must be manually se-
lected to clear the windshield and side glass.
4
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
· Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
· Bi-Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
· Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
· Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
· Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
· Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.
· Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
NOTE: · When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
· In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode
in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are
4
selected.
· Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
· Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
4
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A/C Air Filter -- If Equipped The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to "Maintenance Schedules" for filter service intervals.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or
29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Engine Block Heater -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 307 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 309
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) . . . 310 5
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 331
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 338 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 339 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 340
Tires -- General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped . . . . . . . . 348
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Full Size Spare If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Limited-Use Spare If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 349 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 365
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 5
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 355
Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Premium System If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 360 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 370
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 375 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 375 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Recreational Towing All Models . . . . . . . . 388
STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt. Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat belts.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Normal Starting The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Tip Start
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly 5
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F or 29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
· Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver's side of the vehicle.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.
5
WARNING!
After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. · Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. · Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING! (Continued) · Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Systems These systems prevent the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. They also prevent shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position and the brake pedal is applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
5
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (62TE) The shift lever position display (located in the instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to "AutoStick" in "Starting And Operating" for further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the AutoStick position (below the Drive position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
5
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shift Lever
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING! (Continued)
· Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift 5
lever.
(Continued)
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
· Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
· With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL Use this range when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
· When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.
· Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
5
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode
(refer to "AutoStick" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
Override Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:
· the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
· the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
· the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
· vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and · the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
5
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the AutoStick feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver-interactive feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right (+) or left (-), or as described below.
AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE position.
General Information
· You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
· If a ratio other than first gear is selected, and the vehicle is brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio.
· Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+) once.
· Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
· The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged.
· Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.
· If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
5
· If the system detects powertrain overheating, the Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off. and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
· If the system detects a problem, it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
· Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
· Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.
· Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
CAUTION! (Continued) · Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam- 5
age. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. · Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
· Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded.
· Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE: · Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
· Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
CAUTION!
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
CAUTION!
steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
WARNING!
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
occur.
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
Power Steering Fluid Check
not overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Parking Brake The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
NOTE: · When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
· This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage. · When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
5
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
· Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
· Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the "Brake Warning Light" remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING!
· Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
· The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
· The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
The "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to 5
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the "Brake Warning Light" is not on.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the "Brake Warning Light" and the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. See your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock:
· The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop),
· the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
· brake pedal pulsations,
· and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to "Anti-Lock Brake System" in "Starting and
Operating" for further information.
5
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section of this manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
· The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
· The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
· The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition
· Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate 5
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes:
ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to "Partial Off" for specific reasons as noted below.
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.
Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch (located in the lower switch bank below the heater/air conditioning controls). When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally, with the exception of engine power
ESC Off Switch
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.
WARNING!
In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by pressing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the 5
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
NOTE: · The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light"
and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
· Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 -- Size Designation
3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE: · P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
· Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design 5
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
Size Designation:
EXAMPLE:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
-- Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code
-- R means radial construction -- D means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index -- A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
-- A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
-- The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
5
Load Identification:
....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load -- Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure -- Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation -- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) --03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) --01 means the year 2001 -- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
B-Pillar
Term
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
5
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: · The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Safety
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the "Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information" section of this manual.
5
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial-Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
WARNING!
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
WARNING!
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 5
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
75 mph (120 km/h).
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
5
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:
· Driving style
· Tire pressure
· Distance driven
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
WARNING!
5
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
· Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
WARNING! (Continued) · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- 5
ings.
(Continued)
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.
SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the "rearward cross"
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
5
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to turn off. The system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light." Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will still be ON. In this situation, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire 5
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. · After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: · The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
· Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver Module
· Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five
seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" and LOW TIRE message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 5
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Check TPMS Warning The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: 1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn ON and a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components: · Receiver Module
· Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
· Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel-wells)
· Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light"
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is displayed.
NOTE: 1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the "Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light" will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
5
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B
FUEL REQUIREMENTS This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 5
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: · operate in a lean mode · OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on · poor engine performance · poor cold start and cold driveability · increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:
· change the engine oil and oil filter
· disconnect and reconnect the battery
· drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: · The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
CAUTION! (Continued)
· The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
5
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. · Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 Fuel Cap
WARNING!
5
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
· you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full
· you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling
· you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.
NOTE: · When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed.
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
5
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle's surface.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION!
· Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
· A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the "Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)" to turn on.
· To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top
off" the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5
Tether Cable
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
(Continued)
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on. · A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE: · Tighten the gas cap until you hear a "clicking" sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
· When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver's door.
The label contains the following information: · Name of manufacturer
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
· Month and year of manufacture · Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear 5
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
· Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
· Type of Vehicle
· Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section, please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
5
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and
ready for operation condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW) The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.
Class
Class I - Light Duty Class II - Medium Duty Class III - Heavy Duty
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
2,000 lbs (907 kg) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
5
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
Engine/Transmission
Max. Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
Wt.)
(See Note 1)
2.4L/Auto
11 sq.ft. (1.0 sq.m) (See Note 2)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Auto
22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
5
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
· The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
· The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
· The weight of the driver and all passengers.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to "Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard" in "Starting and Operating" for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
· Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
· Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: · Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. · When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. · Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic 5
transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels. · GCWR must not be exceeded. · Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. GVWR 2. GTW
(Continued)
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) 3. GAWR 4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements Tires
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
· Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve- 5
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing." Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly -- including hazard flashers.
Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs, select a lower gear using the AutoStick shift control.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
NOTE: The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealership service center for assistance.
Electronic Speed Control If Equipped
· Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
· Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
· City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
· Highway Driving Reduce speed.
· Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Front Rear ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED OK
NOT ALLOWED OK
Recreational Towing All Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
CAUTION!
· DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Engine Oil Overheating -- 2.4L Engine Only
Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 6
Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
· On the highways -- slow down.
· In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
· If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Oil Overheating -- 2.4L Engine Only (If Equipped)
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up 6
long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may become too hot. If this happens, the "HOTOIL" message flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at the maximum. You may of course, reduce your speed further if needed.
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage Preparations For Jacking
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
6
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
· Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. · Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. · Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. · Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. · Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
WARNING! (Continued) · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic. · To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires--General Information--for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
6
the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
Front Jacking Location
6
Rear Jacking Location
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
· To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
· To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have 6
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required.
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 -- Valve Stem 2 -- Valve Notch 3 -- Wheel Lug Nut
4 -- Wheel Cover 5 -- Mounting Stud
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug 6
nuts.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
Preparations For Jump-Start
Remote Battery Posts
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left 1 -- Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap) front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash 2 -- Remote Negative (-) Post
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
Locking Tab
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING! Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
6
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
CAUTION!
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
6
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF before attempting to "rock" the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the cupholder liner.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without starting the engine.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the front of the cupholder and push and hold the override lever forward.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the cupholder liner.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
Towing Condition Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed
Wheels OFF the Ground NONE
Rear Front ALL
Automatic Transmissions
If transmission is operable: · Transmission in NEUTRAL · 25 mph (40 km/h)max speed · 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
6
ment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
CAUTION!
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
· Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Damage to the fascia will occur.
(Continued)
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued) · When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. · Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. · If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON position, not the LOCK or ACC positions.
Automatic Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
· The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
· The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi (24 km).
· The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
6
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equip-
ment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on
the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will
occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front
wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Engine Compartment -- 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine Compartment -- 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Onboard Diagnostic System -- OBD II . . . . . . 419
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 7
A/C Air Filter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders . . . . . . 451 Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Weather Strip Care Soft And Hard Top . . . . 453 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 466 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.4L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
1 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 -- Air Cleaner Filter
2 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
8 -- Engine Oil Fill
3 -- Automatic Transmission Dipstick
9 -- Coolant Pressure Cap
4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir
10 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
5 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
11 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 -- Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.6L
1 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 -- Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5 -- Air Cleaner Filter 6 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 7 -- Engine Oil Fill 8 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light" (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
CAUTION!
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
· If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
7
improperly installed. A "GASCAP" message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a clicking sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
"Reset" button to turn off the message. If the problem
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)." Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
7
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of 7
the range marking.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 2.4L Engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 3.6L Engine SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on 7
engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it's performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to _Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
7
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
· Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
· Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
· If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
WARNING!
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
7
should be done by an experienced technician.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result.
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand. Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underneath the instrument panel if you release it.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
A/C Air Filter Replacement
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
7
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
cover.
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- 7
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
· Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Cooling System Drain, Flush, And Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine 7
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
· The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34°F (37°C) are anticipated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
· Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· The warning words "DO NOT OPEN HOT" on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
· Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level Four-Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the "ADD" and "FULL" lines, shown 7
on the bottle.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal
Six-Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the "COLD" and "FULL" range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
· Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
· Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
7
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
WARNING!
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· To avoid contamination from foreign matter or · Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
failure. This could result in a collision.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. Automatic Transmission
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake contained within a single housing.
failure. This could result in a collision. · Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid.
7
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Selection Of Lubricant
(Continued)
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer's recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. Should you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Transmission Fluid And Filter Changes
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
maintenance intervals.
resistance built into your vehicle.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission What Causes Corrosion?
is disassembled for any reason.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
7
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- · Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
· Stone and gravel impact.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly · Insects, tree sap, and tar.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
· Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
· Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
· Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Special Care
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
· Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
7
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All. Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any 7
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Center Console Cupholders
Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.
Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Convertible Top Care
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
· Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
· Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the 7
vehicles interior. · Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment.
Washing Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top's drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local dealership for further suggestions.
Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains, apply MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Protection For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your cloth top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is suggested. The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care Soft And Hard Top
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi- 7
cally with MOPAR Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable.
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/TIPM location.
Integrated Power Module
Cavity 1 2
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
--
Mini Fuse
Description
--
20 Amp Yellow
Power Top Module If Equipped
Brake Vacuum Pump
Cavity
3
4 5 6 7 8
Cartridge Fuse --
-- -- -- -- --
Mini Fuse
Description
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Brake Switch
Ignition Switch
Trailer Tow If Equipped Power Mirror Switch/Climate Controls Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 1 Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Sense 2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Mini Fuse
Description
9
40 Amp Green
Battery Feed Power Seats If Equipped
10
--
20 Amp Yellow
Instrument Panel/ Power Locks/ Interior Lights
11
--
15 Amp Lt Blue
Selectable Power Outlet (Inside Center Arm Rest)
12
--
----
13
--
20 Amp Ignition/Cigar Yellow Lighter
7
14
--
10 Amp Red
Instrument Panel
15
40 Amp Green
-- Radiator Fan Relay
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 16
17
18 19 20 21
Cartridge Fuse --
--
40 Amp Green
-- -- --
Mini Fuse
Description
15 Amp Lt. Blue
10 Amp Red
--
20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Lt. Blue 10 Amp
Red
Sunroof If Equipped Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Clock/Steering Control Module (SCM) Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay Audio Amplifier If Equipped
Radio
Siren If Equipped
Cavity 22 23 24 25 26
Cartridge Fuse --
-- -- -- --
Mini Fuse
Description
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Lt. Blue 25 Amp Natural
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Lt. Blue
Ignition Run Climate Controls/Hot Cupholder If Equipped
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 3
Sunroof If Equipped
Ignition Run -- Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 2
Cavity 27
28 29 30
Cartridge Fuse --
-- -- --
Mini Fuse
Description
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
-- 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Run Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run -- Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
Ignition Run Heated Seats If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Cavity
Cartridge Fuse
Mini Fuse
Description
31
--
-- Spare
32
30 Amp Pink
--
Auto Shutdown (ASD) Relay 1
Switch Bank/
33
--
10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Link Connector/ Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
34
30 Amp Pink
Anti-Lock Brakes
(ABS) Module If
--
Equipped/ Electronic Stability
7
Control (ESC) Mod-
ule If Equipped
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 35
36 37
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
--
Mini Fuse
Description
--
-- 25 Amp Natural
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Module If Equipped/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Module If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM)/ Driver Door Module (DDM)
Power Top Module If Equipped
CAUTION!
· When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
· Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
· Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
LIGHT BULBS Interior
Bulb No.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp. . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
Visor Vanity Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220 Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220 Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IKLE14140 Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer 7
possibility of compressor damage when the system is for replacement.
started again.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHT BULBS Exterior
Bulb No.
Bi-Halogen Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIR2
Front Turn Signal Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK
Front Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
License Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver's side of the vehicle.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector behind the headlamp.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb. outward from assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, 7
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
2. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing.
1. Rotate the bulb's electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Backup Lamps
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the tail lamp (requires removal of a push pin holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp).
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the outboard edge of the tail lamp.
3. Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard sides, and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from the vehicle.
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting bracket during tail lamp removal.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp. 5. Remove bulb from socket and replace. 6. Reinstall the tail lamp, fasteners, and trunk liner.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines -- (Except 2.4L PZEV)
16.9 Gallons
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)
18.5 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.5 Quarts
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.7 Quarts
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.6 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Metric
64 Liters 70 Liters
4.4 Liters 5.6 Liters
7.3 Liters
11 Liters
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil 2.4L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil 3.6L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs 2.4L Engine except PZEV*
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs 2.4L with PZEV* ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs 3.6L Engine
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection
87 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
Chassis Component Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4 product. MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4 product.
7
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
I N
T
E
CONTENTS
N A
N
C
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
E
Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 472
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
T E
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
N to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
A vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
N C
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
E conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S C
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
H E
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
D indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
U remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
L E
scheduled maintenance.
S
8
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, "Oil Change Required" will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the "Change Oil" message is displayed. Depending on operating conditions, the message may appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: · The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
· Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
· Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or under "Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 M
A
At Each Stop For Fuel
I
· Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
N T
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level E
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
N A
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when N
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
C
E
· Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
S C
Once A Month
H E
· Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
D U
damage.
L
· Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
E S
as required.
8
· Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
M 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I
· Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
N operation.
T
E At Each Oil Change
N
A · Change the engine oil filter.
N
C · Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
E
S
CAUTION!
C
H Failure to perform the required maintenance items
E may result in damage to the vehicle. D
U
L
E
S
8
Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 M A
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
I
Schedule
N T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
N
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
A
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
S C
12 months.
H
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
M 474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N T
18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N C E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 24,000 miles (39 000 km).
S Inspect the CV joints. C Inspect exhaust system.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km). Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine). Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475 M A
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
I
Schedule
N T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
N
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
A
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints.
S C
Inspect exhaust system.
H
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
M 476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N T
42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N C E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km). Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine). Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 72,000 miles (117 000 km).
Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 M A
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
I
Schedule
N T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
N
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
A
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever comes first.
S C
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
H
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
M 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N T
66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N C E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km). Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine). Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine). Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 104,000 miles (169 000 km).
Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV Engine Only).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M A
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
I
Schedule
N T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
N
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
A
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
S C
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
M 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N T
90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N C E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 120,000 miles (195 000 km).
S Inspect the CV joints. C Inspect exhaust system. H Change the automatic transmission fluid
E
and filter(s).
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km). Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine). Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M A
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
I
Schedule
N T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
N
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
A
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints.
S C
Inspect exhaust system.
H
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
M 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N T
114 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
N
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
C
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
WARNING!
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 486 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 486 In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 9
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure correctly and in a timely manner.
the
vehicle
is
fixed
9
486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
· If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: · Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 2479753
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French
In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
· Authorized dealership name
· Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
· Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487
the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
· Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
· Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
· Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
· 18008904038 (U.S.)
· 18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
· www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
494 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Accessory Delay, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 437 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 427 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,430 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,430 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,290,429 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63,67,83,203
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,64 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,211 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,273 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,465
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 208,221 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 290 Automatic Transaxle
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,443 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 26 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
INDEX 495
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,83 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,467 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 80 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,460 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,459
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
10
496 INDEX
Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,425 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,368 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,285 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,75,77 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,75
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,233,252,261 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,223 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 276 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,439 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 437,465,466 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,451 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
INDEX 497
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,287,288,294 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 10
498 INDEX
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 173 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 218 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 420 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,466 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,368 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,465 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,465,466 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,221,424 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,425
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,465 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 64 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,368 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,433 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,372
INDEX 499
Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,430 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,466 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,166,463 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,370 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 10
500 INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,467 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,467 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 466 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,164,211,462 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,372
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,466 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,465 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,374,419 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,27,144,363 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,378 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,377 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Hands-Free Phone (UconnectTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
INDEX 501
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,162,460
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 166 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,171 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,162 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 166 10
502 INDEX
Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 176 Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,202 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,167 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,396 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 166,210,463 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,75 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,459 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,161
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,63,67,83,203 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
INDEX 503
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 333 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,211,462 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,162 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 163,171 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 10
504 INDEX
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 214 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,162 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 212,355 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,161,166,210,462,463 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 202 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,376 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,75 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 214,420 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,222 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,488 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,61,65 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61
INDEX 505
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,209 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,221 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,221 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,466
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,221,424 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,466 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,465 10
506 INDEX
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,465 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,420 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,489
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 155 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Phone, Hands-Free (UconnectTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 340
Power Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 185 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Remote Control
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 283 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
INDEX 507
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 208,221 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,273
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 10
508 INDEX
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,43,83
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,77 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,44 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 437,466 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,233,252,261 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 297 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,166,463 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,349,394 Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 173,209 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,305
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
INDEX 509
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,459 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 57 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 290 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 202,393 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 10
510 INDEX
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 340 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,344,491
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,341
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 355 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,344 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Transaxle Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,443 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
INDEX 511
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 176 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166,210,463
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 UconnectTM (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 200 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 276 10
512 INDEX
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,375,376 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,459 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,171,433 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,287,288,294 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,171
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Windstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
INDEX 513
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12C27-126-AD
4th Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Acrobat Distiller 8.3.1 (Windows)